2006 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................4 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 101 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 191 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 237 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 263 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 277 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 281 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
Information Provided by:
This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Accord Sedan. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.
The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.
Owner’s Identif ication
POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33SDAC30 .
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE
05/06/03 09:24:35 31SDA630 0001
Information Provided by:
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and willbe pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
05/06/03 09:24:41 31SDA630 0002
Information Provided by:
-
-
--
-
-
To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.
Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.
Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.
on the vehicle.
A Few Words About Safety
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety SectionInstructions
Safety Labels
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.
05/06/03 09:24:52 31SDA630 0003
Information Provided by:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER WINDOWSWITCHES
GAUGES
HOOD RELEASEHANDLE
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
AUDIO SYSTEM
AIRBAGS
(P.64)
(P.11, 23)
(P.58)INDICATORS
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER
POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH
SHIFT LEVER
(P.90)
(P.77)
(P.91)
(P.82)
(P.156)
(P.157)(P.99)
(P.170, 173)
(P.102)
(P.114)
05/06/03 09:25:26 31SDA630 0007
Information Provided by:
*
*
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your
Vehicle
ataG
lance
5
INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS
MOONROOFSWITCH
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS
HORNSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER
PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)
HAZARDWARNING BUTTON
VSA OFF SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.71)
(P.69)
(P.141)
(P.94)
VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES
(P.183)(P.73)
(P.72, 108)
(P.145)
(P.71)
(P.68)
05/06/03 09:25:32 31SDA630 0008
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
-
This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9
.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 20..Seat Belt System Components . 20
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21........ 21
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23
How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34
All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34
All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag................Poses Serious Risks . 35
If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37
If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and
.........................Small Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38
.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
...............................With LATCH . 43...................................With a Belt . 45
..............................With a Tether . 47...........Protecting Larger Children . 48
..................Using a Booster Seat . 49When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 50...Additional Safety Precautions . 51
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52...................................Safety Labels . 53
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
7
05/06/03 09:25:38 31SDA630 0010
Information Provided by:
-
You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.
Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).
A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.
16
5134
193
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
8
05/06/03 09:25:48 31SDA630 0011
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.
The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and
. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wearyour seat belts
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
9
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)(7)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)(8)
(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners
05/06/03 09:25:54 31SDA630 0012
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)
In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.
Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.
Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system alsoincludes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.
05/06/09 09:12:24 31SDA630 0013
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page
for more information on howyour front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact (seepage for more information on howyour side airbags work).
Your vehicle a
more information on how your side
lso has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page for
curtain airbags work).25
3028
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
11
05/06/03 09:26:13 31SDA630 0014
Information Provided by:
The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:
To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.
Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.
The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.
They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags can pose hazards.
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.
12
05/06/03 09:26:19 31SDA630 0015
Information Provided by:
-
CONTINUED
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.
Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.
The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.
Sguidelines on how to properly
ee pages for important
protect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.
After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.
See page for how doors, and page for how the door
to lock the
monitor indicator works.
Your vehicle has a doormonitor indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.
34 51
6077
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
13
05/06/03 09:26:29 31SDA630 0016
Information Provided by:
If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page
). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.
If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust thefront seats.
7385
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.
05/06/03 09:26:37 31SDA630 0017
Information Provided by:
Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.
Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.
See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.
87
85
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
15
Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.
Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.
05/06/03 09:26:45 31SDA630 0018
Information Provided by:
If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.
This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.
Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the SeatBelts
5.
16
Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.
05/06/03 09:26:52 31SDA630 0019
Information Provided by:
After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.
Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.
This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.
The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).
Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.
20
CONTINUED
Maintain a Proper SittingPosition
6.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
17
RELEASEBUTTONS
05/06/03 09:27:00 31SDA630 0020
Information Provided by:
When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.
In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
18
Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.
05/06/03 09:27:06 31SDA630 0021
Information Provided by:
If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.
Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.
Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.
Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.
Two people should never use thesame seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.
Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.
Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
19
05/06/03 09:27:12 31SDA630 0022
Information Provided by:
Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.
The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.
The seat belts use the samemonitoring system as the frontairbags. The system may not workproperly under these conditions:
Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.
The front passenger is not sittingproperly.
The front passenger’s seat-back ispressed forward by a folded-downrear seat.
If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.
If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a small child isriding there, the indicator will notcome on and the beeper will notsound.
Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or objects on thefront seat.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
20
05/06/03 09:27:21 31SDA630 0023
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.
The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.
All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).
If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.
16
45
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
21
05/06/03 09:27:30 31SDA630 0024
Information Provided by:
The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.
For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.
For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.
Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.
The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.
If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.
The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.
If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.
224
224
Honda Warranty Information
do not deploy
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
22
Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.
Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.
05/06/03 09:27:39 31SDA630 0025
Information Provided by:
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
25
28
30
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
23
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)(9)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(5)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors
05/06/03 09:27:47 31SDA630 0026
Information Provided by:
Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.
An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).
Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.
A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in ON (II).
An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the frontpassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).
Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight of an infant orsmall child is detected, thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off.
A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page
).
21
27
30
31
31
27
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
05/06/03 09:27:55 31SDA630 0027
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.
The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.
Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
25
05/06/03 09:28:03 31SDA630 0028
Information Provided by:
Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.
If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.
If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.
After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
26
05/06/03 09:28:10 31SDA630 0029
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to workproperly:
Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.
The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
27
DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR
PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR
05/06/03 09:28:19 31SDA630 0030
Information Provided by:
Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.
When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
).
Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat. If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.
If the weight sensors detect thatthere is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.
31
224
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.
28
05/06/03 09:28:26 31SDA630 0031
Information Provided by:
There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.
A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.
To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.
If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.
Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.
Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if the heightand position sensors in the seatdetect a child has leaned into theside airbag’s deployment path, theairbag will shut off.
31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
29
05/06/03 09:28:34 31SDA630 0032
Information Provided by:
In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belttensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.
If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.
If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.
If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:
How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
05/06/03 09:28:43 31SDA630 0033
Information Provided by:
If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.
This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.
This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child on the front passenger’sseat. It does there is aproblem with the airbag.
When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then goout (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.
59
CONTINUED
not mean
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works
How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works
not
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
31
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
CanadaU.S.
CanadaU.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.
05/06/03 09:28:52 31SDA630 0034
Information Provided by:
Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.
However, if the indicator comes onwith no passenger in the front, orwith an adult in the seat, there maybe a problem with the advancedairbag system. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.
If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.
The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.
If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.
Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:
Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.
Airbag Service
32
05/06/03 09:28:59 31SDA630 0035
Information Provided by:
Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.
Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.
Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.
This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.
Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.
Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.
Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
33
05/06/03 09:29:04 31SDA630 0036
Information Provided by:
-
--
If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.
Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.
To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.
(see pages ).(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.
475148
38
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle
Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly
34
Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.
Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.
05/06/03 09:29:11 31SDA630 0037
Information Provided by:
-
Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.
Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.
If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).
Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.
According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.
Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.
The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.
48
27
CONTINUED
Protecting Children General Guidelines
InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.
Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.
Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat
The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
35
05/06/03 09:29:21 31SDA630 0038
Information Provided by:
-
To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
36
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
05/06/03 09:29:35 31SDA630 0039
Information Provided by:
-
Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.
Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:
Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).
Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.
If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.
If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.
During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.
48
13
16
16
Protecting Children General Guidelines
If a Child Requires CloseAttention
If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren
Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.
Never let two children use thesame seat belt.
Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
37
05/06/03 09:29:44 31SDA630 0040
Information Provided by:
-
Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.
Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).
Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.
This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).
An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.
78
83
Protecting Children General Guidelines, Protecting Infants and Small Children
Do not leave children alone in avehicle.
Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.
Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.
Child Seat Type
Protecting Infants
38
05/06/03 09:29:52 31SDA630 0041
Information Provided by:
Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.
If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.
In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.
Child Seat Placement
Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
39
Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.
Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.
05/06/03 09:29:59 31SDA630 0042
Information Provided by:
A child who is at least 1 year old, andwho fits within the child seat maker’sweight and height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.
We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.
If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.
We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.
27
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.
Protecting Small Children
40
05/06/03 09:30:07 31SDA630 0043
Information Provided by:
Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).
In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:
Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.
When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two second-row seats.
1.
2.
43
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.
The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
41
Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.
05/06/03 09:30:16 31SDA630 0044
Information Provided by:
After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:
All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.
After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.
The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
42
05/06/03 09:30:24 31SDA630 0045
Information Provided by:
Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.
Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:
Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.
Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.
The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat withLATCH
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
43
Rigid typeLOWER ANCHOR MARKS
05/06/03 09:30:32 31SDA630 0046
Information Provided by:
Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connection asshown above.
Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.
Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.
Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the headrestraint, making sure the strap isnot twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.
4.
5.
6.
7.
87
Installing a Child Seat
44
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type ANCHOR
05/06/03 09:30:39 31SDA630 0047
Information Provided by:
When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.
1. 2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
45
05/06/03 09:30:45 31SDA630 0048
Information Provided by:
After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.
To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.
To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
46
05/06/03 09:30:51 31SDA630 0049
Information Provided by:
A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.
Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.
Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.
After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap through the head restraintlegs.
After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap through the headrestraint, and over the seat-back.
Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
43 45
Installing a Child Seat with aTether
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
47
TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR ANCHORTETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
05/06/03 09:31:01 31SDA630 0050
Information Provided by:
To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:
When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.
Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?
Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?
The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
48
Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.
05/06/03 09:31:09 31SDA630 0051
Information Provided by:
Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?
Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.
Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.
A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.
4.
5.
3.
41
Protecting Larger Children
Using a Booster Seat
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
49
05/06/03 09:31:17 31SDA630 0052
Information Provided by:
If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.
Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.
Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.
If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.
The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.
Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.
To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.
48
Protecting Larger Children
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront
50
05/06/03 09:31:27 31SDA630 0053
Information Provided by:
This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.
Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.
This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.
If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.
Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.
Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.
Two children should never use thesame seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
51
05/06/03 09:31:32 31SDA630 0054
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:
With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.
The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.
You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.
1.2.3.4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
52
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.
Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.
05/06/03 09:31:39 31SDA630 0055
Information Provided by:
These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully. If a label comes off orbecomes hard to read (except for theU.S. dashboard label which isremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver
andP
assengerSafety
53
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
RADIATORCAP
DASHBOARD
05/06/03 09:32:11 31SDA630 0056
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58.............................................Gauges . 64
Odometer/Outside.............Temperature Display . 64
.....................................Odometer . 64...Outside Temperature Display . 64
...................................Trip Meter . 65...................Temperature Gauge . 65
..................................Fuel Gauge . 66..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 66
Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 67
......................Wipers and Washers . 68...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 69
Automatic Lighting Off.........................................Feature . 70
................Daytime Running Lights . 70........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71
..............................Hazard Warning . 71.................Rear Window Defogger . 72
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73...............................Keys and Locks . 74
........................Immobilizer System . 75................................Ignition Switch . 76
......................................Door Locks . 77..................Childproof Door Locks . 78
.......................Remote Transmitter . 78................................................Trunk . 82
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 83....................................Seat Heaters . 84
.................................................Seats . 85.............Power Seat Adjustment . 85
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 85.............Front Seat Adjustments . 86
Driver’s Seat Manual Height..............................Adjustment . 86
Driver’s Seat Power Height..............................Adjustment . 87
..........................Head Restraints . 87.......................Folding Rear Seat . 88
.............................................Mirrors . 90....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 90
..............................Power Windows . 91Power Window Control
...............................Operations . 93.........................................Moonroof . 94
.................................Parking Brake . 95..........................................Sun Visor . 96
..................................Vanity Mirror . 96.................................Interior Lights . 97................................Ceiling Light . 97
...........Individual Interior Lights . 97
...........Interior Convenience Items . 98.......................Beverage Holders . 99
..........Accessory Power Sockets . 99...............Console Compartment . 99
....................Sunglasses Holder . 100..................................Glove Box . 100
Instruments and Controls
Instruments
andC
ontrols
55
05/06/03 09:32:19 31SDA630 0058
Information Provided by:
Control Locations
56
MIRROR CONTROLS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
AUDIO SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM
HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS
HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON
CRUISE CONTROLS
MOONROOF SWITCH
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
HOOD RELEASEHANDLE
INDICATORSGAUGES
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER
POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH
SHIFT LEVER
(P.58)(P.64)
(P.94)
(P.90)
(P.77)
(P.82)
(P.156)
(P.145)
(P.71)
(P.114)
(P.102)
(P.109)
(P.170, 173)
(P.99)
(P.95)(P.157)
05/06/03 09:32:25 31SDA630 0059
Information Provided by:
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments
andC
ontrols
57
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORLOW FUEL INDICATORMALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR
SEC URITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR
DOOR AND TRUNKOPEN MONITOR
CRUISE CONTROL MAININDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.58)
(P.58)
(P.61)
(P.61)
(P.58)
(P.62)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.59)
(P.63)
(P.62)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR(P.63)
(P.58)
CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR
SEAT BELTREMINDER LIGHT
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.59)
LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
(P.60)
(P.59)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.59)
(P.62)
05/06/03 09:32:33 31SDA630 0060
Information Provided by:
The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .
See page .
This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you and yourfront passenger have not fastenedyour seat belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .20
250
251
251
Low Oil PressureIndicator
Charging SystemIndicator
Malfunction IndicatorLamp
Seat Belt ReminderIndicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
58
05/06/03 09:32:42 31SDA630 0061
Information Provided by:
This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .
This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .
This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, automatic seat belttensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.
If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .
30
31
180
1.
2.
253
Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator
Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments
andC
ontrols
59
CanadaU.S.
CanadaU.S.
05/06/03 09:32:53 31SDA630 0062
Information Provided by:
The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.
All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).
This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.
This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). For moreinformation, see page .
This indicator has three functions:
It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).
It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.
If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.
2.
3.
1.
182
182
182
Door and Trunk Open MonitorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
60
05/06/03 16:43:37 31SDA630 0063
Information Provided by:
The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blink,or if they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.
When you turn on the HazardWarning button, both turn signalindicators blink. All turn signals onthe outside of the vehicle shouldflash.
This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.
This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3 ) offuel remaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.
221 222
Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators
Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments
andC
ontrols
61
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
05/06/03 09:33:11 31SDA630 0064
Information Provided by:
This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .
This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page
for more information on thesecurity system.
When the daytime running lights(DRL) are on, this indicator comeson with reduced brightness.
If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.
144
70
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
05/06/03 09:33:18 31SDA630 0065
Information Provided by:
This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).
This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.
This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control masterbutton (see page ).
This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page
for information on operating thecruise control.
This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).
This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.
145
145
193
75
208
Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System
Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System
Canadian models only
Immobilizer SystemIndicator
Cruise Control MainIndicator
Maintenance MinderIndicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments
andC
ontrols
63
05/07/01 10:05:16 31SDA630 0066
Information Provided by:
The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.
The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.
The odometer and the outsidetemperature display use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.
This display shows the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.
EX-L and EX-V6
OdometerOdometer/Outside TemperatureDisplay
Outside Temperature Display
Gauges
64
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETERFUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATUREGAUGE
TRIP METERODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR SELECT/RESET KNOB
U.S. model shown
05/06/03 09:33:40 31SDA630 0067
Information Provided by:
± ±
- - - -- - - -
This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.
This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.
If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.
NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.
Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequences appear, 1 second at atime: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).
When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.
When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
248
Trip Meter Temperature Gauge
Gauges
Instruments
andC
ontrols
65
05/06/03 09:33:49 31SDA630 0068
Information Provided by:
This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.
If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message willappear in the odometer/outsidetemperature display. As soon as it issafely possible, turn the engine offand check that the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap andtighten it 1 click. Although you can
use the Select/Reset button to cycle the fuel cap warning off of the display, it will be displayed againeach time the engine is started. Itwill take several days of normaldriving for the vehicle to turn thewarning off.
If the vehicle on board diagnosticsystem continues to detect aproblem, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) will illuminate. If theMIL does not go off, have yourdealer inspect the vehicle. For moreinformation, see page .
The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.
193
251
Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Indicator(odometer/outside temperaturemessage)
Maintenance Minder Display
Gauges
66
Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.
05/07/01 10:05:26 31SDA630 0069
Information Provided by:
*
* Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments
andC
ontrols
67
WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS
INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS
MOONROOFSWITCH
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS
HORNSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER
PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)
HAZARDWARNING BUTTON
(P.71)
(P.69)
(P.141)
VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES
(P.94)
(P.181)(P.73)
(P.68)
(P.71)
(P.145)
(P.72, 108)
VSA OFF SWITCH
05/06/03 09:34:01 31SDA630 0070
Information Provided by:
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers
Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.
The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.
The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operation whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).
1.2.3.4.5.6.
Except U.S. VP
Windshield Wiper
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
Windshield Washer
INT
Wipers and Washers
68
05/06/03 09:34:09 31SDA630 0071
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlight onHigh beamsFlash high beams
Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.
Turning the switchon the left lever to the positionturns on the parking lights, taillights,side marker lights, rear license platelights and lights-on indicator.Turning the switch to the
position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights-onindicator comes on as a reminder.
To turn on the highbeams, push the lever forward untilyou hear a click. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).To turn off the high beams, pull thelever back. To flash the high beams,pull the lever farther back, and thenrelease it. The high beams remain onuntil the lever is released.
1.2.3.4.5.6.
62
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal
Headlights
High Beams
Turn Signal, Headlights
Instruments
andC
ontrols
69
05/06/03 09:34:16 31SDA630 0072
Information Provided by:
This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, side marker lights,taillights, and rear license plate lightswithin 15 seconds of removing thekey from the ignition switch andclosing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.
The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.
With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights
70
05/06/03 09:34:23 31SDA630 0073
Information Provided by:
Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.
The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normal
brightness when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).
If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.
If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), theillumination turns off in about 10seconds.
To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or
. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.
Hazard WarningInstrument Panel Brightness
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning
Instruments
andC
ontrols
71
U.S. model shownSELECT/RESET KNOB
05/06/03 09:34:31 31SDA630 0074
Information Provided by:
The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove/in the button comes on toshow the defogger is on. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.
Rear Window Defogger
72
Manual A/C type shown Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation system
05/06/07 17:18:50 31SDA630 0075
Information Provided by:
Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.
Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.
Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andthe indicator lights.
Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.
1.
2.
3.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments
andC
ontrols
73
Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.
05/06/03 09:34:42 31SDA630 0076
Information Provided by:
Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.
The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.
You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.
Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.
Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.
4.
5.
Keys and Locks
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
74
VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)
KEYNUMBERTAG
MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER
05/06/03 09:34:50 31SDA630 0077
Information Provided by:
If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.
If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.
When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go out. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.
The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.
As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments
andC
ontrols
75
05/06/03 09:34:57 31SDA630 0078
Information Provided by:
- -
-
-
You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly. If the front wheelsare turned, the anti-theft lock maymake it difficult to turn the key.Firmly turn the steering wheel to theleft or to the right as you turn thekey.
The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III).
You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.
This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).
Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.
LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
76
05/06/03 09:35:03 31SDA630 0079
Information Provided by:
You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.
Each front door has a power doorlock master switch. Either switchlocks and unlocks all doors. Push thetop of the switch to lock all doors;push the bottom to unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab on it. Pushdown the tab to lock the door andpull it up to unlock. When you pushdown the tab on the driver’s door, allthe doors lock.
To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down, and close the door.
All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn itclockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors unlock when youturn the key a second time within afew seconds.
Door Locks
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
Instruments
andC
ontrols
77
top
bottom
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH
Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.
Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.
05/06/03 09:35:10 31SDA630 0080
Information Provided by:
-
With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors.
The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.
Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior andinterior lights will flash. The doorsdo not lock if they are not fullyclosed or the key is in the ignitionswitch.
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter
LOCK
78
LEVER PANICBUTTON
TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON
LOCKBUTTON
UNLOCKBUTTON
05/06/03 09:35:18 31SDA630 0081
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.
Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.
When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system isactive.
Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.
Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if the keyis in the ignition switch.
You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if they are notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.
If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock.
After the doors automatically relock,the security system will be active.
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK
PANIC
TRUNK
Instruments
andC
ontrols
79
05/06/03 09:35:24 31SDA630 0082
Information Provided by:
Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.
Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.
If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.
1.
2.
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery
80
SCREW
05/06/03 09:35:33 31SDA630 0083
Information Provided by:
+
Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.
Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.
Install the parts in reverse order.
3.
4.
5.
As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments
andC
ontrols
81
BATTERY
TAB
05/06/03 09:35:40 31SDA630 0084
Information Provided by:
To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:
Give the person the valet key.
Pull up on the trunk release leverlocated to the left of the driver’sseat.
Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key. Also make surethe trunk pass-through cover islocked (see page ).
Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See
on page .
You can open the trunk in either ofthe following ways:
1.
2.
52
165
89
Trunk
CarbonMonoxide Hazard
82
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE LEVERMASTERKEY
05/07/01 10:05:37 31SDA630 0085
Information Provided by:
As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.
To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.
For more information about childsafety, see page .38
Emergency Trunk Opener
Trunk
Instruments
andC
ontrols
83
05/06/03 09:35:53 31SDA630 0086
Information Provided by:
After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.
In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.
Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.
If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag system, there isno heater in the passenger’s seat-back. The ignition switch must beON (II) to use the heaters.
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
Seat Heaters
84
05/06/03 09:35:59 31SDA630 0087
Information Provided by:
-
Raises or lowers theseat.
Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.
Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.
Moves the seatforward and backward.
The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.
To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.
The passenger’s seat has twoswitches. One moves the seatforward and backward, and the otherraises and lowers the seat.
See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and LX-V6
1413
U.S. EX-V6Canadian EX-V6
U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
Power Seat Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support
Seats
Instruments
andC
ontrols
85
05/06/03 09:36:10 31SDA630 0088
Information Provided by:
To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.
The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.
To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.
U.S. VP and SECanadian DX-G and SE
Front Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment
Seats
86
05/06/03 09:36:17 31SDA630 0089
Information Provided by:
The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.
Make all adjustments before youstart driving.
They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraintsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonand push the restraint down.
Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.
See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.
U.S. EXCanadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
15
Seats
Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment
Head Restraints
Instruments
andC
ontrols
87
RELEASE BUTTON
05/06/03 09:36:26 31SDA630 0090
Information Provided by:
The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.
To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf.Turn the key clockwise, pull downthe top of the seat-back, then releasethe key.
When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.
To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.
To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.
Folding Rear Seat
Seats
88
MASTER KEY
GUIDEPull
05/06/03 09:36:33 31SDA630 0091
Information Provided by:
Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.
Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .
For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .
The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.
52
52
164
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
Seats
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Trunk Pass-through Cover
Instruments
andC
ontrols
89
KEY CYLINDER
LID
KNOB
05/06/03 09:36:41 31SDA630 0092
Information Provided by:
Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.
The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.
Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.
When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.
The outside mirrors are manuallyadjustable.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.
Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).
1.
3.
2.
4.
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-GAdjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
90
TAB
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
05/06/03 09:36:49 31SDA630 0093
Information Provided by:
-
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Close the window bypulling the switch up and holding it.
To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.
The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.
Except U.S. VP and LX, andCanadian DX-G
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows
AUTO
Mirrors, Power Windows
Instruments
andC
ontrols
91
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.
05/06/03 09:36:56 31SDA630 0094
Information Provided by:
- If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.
Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.
To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.
The passenger windows cannot beraised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.
1.
2.
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
92
05/06/03 09:37:03 31SDA630 0095
Information Provided by:
You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.
To open the windows further,press the button again.
You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.
The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.
You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.
Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.
1.
2.
3.1.
2.
Power Window ControlOperationsOpening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter
Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key
Power Windows
Instruments
andC
ontrols
93
UNLOCK BUTTON
Open
Close
05/06/03 09:37:14 31SDA630 0096
Information Provided by:
Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.
To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again.
To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.
To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again.
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button
. To close the moonroof, pressand hold the upper button . Toopen the moonroof, press and holdthe lower button . Release thebutton when the moonroof gets tothe desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.
The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Moonroof
Power Windows, Moonroof
94
MOONROOF SWITCH
Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.
Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.
05/06/03 09:37:24 31SDA630 0097
Information Provided by:
To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).
The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to operate themoonroof.
59
Parking Brake
Moonroof, Parking Brake
Instruments
andC
ontrols
95
PARKING BRAKE LEVERIf you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.
Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs.
05/06/03 09:37:30 31SDA630 0098
Information Provided by:
To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.
To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.
Except U.S. VP andCanadian DX-G
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
96
05/06/03 09:37:36 31SDA630 0099
Information Provided by:
The ceiling lights have a three ortwo-position switch; ON (for three-position), Door Activated, and OFF.In the Door Activated (center or left)position, the lights come on whenyou:
After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.
Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.
The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.
The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the spotlightlenses to turn them on and off.
Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.
The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when you open that door.The light around the ignition switchonly comes on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light fadesout in about 30 seconds.
In the U.S. VP and the Canadian DX-G, the front doors do not havecourtesy lights.
U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6Canadian SE and SE-V6
U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
Ceiling Light
Individual Interior Lights
Interior Lights
Instruments
andC
ontrols
97
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
COURTESY LIGHT
05/06/03 09:37:45 31SDA630 0100
Information Provided by:
Interior Convenience Items
98
REAR DOOR POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
GLOVE BOX
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CENTER POCKET,COIN POCKET andACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT andACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
FRONT DOOR POCKET andBEVERAGE HOLDER
05/06/03 09:37:49 31SDA630 0101
Information Provided by:
Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.
To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.
To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.
You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.
These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). None of the sockets willpower an automotive type cigarettelighter element. When more thanone socket is being used, thecombined power rating of theaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).
The console compartment isequipped with a coin holder.
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
Beverage Holders
Accessory Power Sockets
Console Compartment
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments
andC
ontrols
99
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
05/06/03 09:37:58 31SDA630 0102
Information Provided by:
Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.
The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.
To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
100
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.
Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.
05/06/03 09:38:05 31SDA630 0103
Information Provided by:
The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.
The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.
The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 102...............Voice Control System . 104
..........Dual Temperature Control . 111..............Climate Control Sensors . 113
..........................Playing the Radio . 114...............Voice Control System . 116
.....................To Play the Radio . 116....................To Select a Station . 116
.................Adjusting the Sound . 119....................Radio Frequencies . 120
........................Radio Reception . 120..................................Playing a CD . 122
..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 124.............................To Play a CD . 124
...............To Stop Playing a CD . 127Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 127Operating the Optional CD
.................................Changer . 128.........CD Player Error Messages . 129
.....................Protecting your CDs . 130.................General Information . 130
..........................Protecting CDs . 130...............................Playing a Tape . 131
..........................To Play a Tape . 132............To Stop Playing a Tape . 132
............Tape Search Functions . 133Caring for the Tape and
.....................................Player . 134Playing the XM Satellite
......................................Radio . 135...............Satellite Digital Radio . 135
...To Play XM Satellite Radio . 136..................To Select a Channel . 136
..............Satellite Radio Signals . 138Receiving Satellite Radio
....................................Service . 139.............Steering Wheel Controls . 141
.................Radio Theft Protection . 142..........................Setting the Clock . 143
............................Security System . 144...............................Cruise Control . 145
HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 148
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Features
Features
101
TM
TM
05/06/03 09:38:11 31SDA630 0104
Information Provided by:
Vents, Heating, and A/C
102
TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTONREAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(DRIVER’S SIDE)
FAN CONTROLBUTTONS
TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(PASSENGER’S SIDE)
MODEBUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON
FAN SPEEDINDICATOR
AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON
MODE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON
WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON
FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation SystemCanadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
05/06/03 09:38:17 31SDA630 0105
Information Provided by:
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
103
AUTO BUTTON
MODE ICONS
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
DUAL BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
OFF BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemCanadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
05/06/03 09:38:22 31SDA630 0106
Information Provided by:
▲ ▼
The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See theNavi section in your Quick StartGuide for an overview of this system,and the Navigation System manualfor complete details.
Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.
You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the fan controlbuttons. The fan speed isrepresented by vertical bars in thedisplay.
You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the A/C buttonnext to the display and then,pressing the fan control icons.
Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.
The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings byselecting the DUAL button.
Push the DUAL button. When theindicator in the button is on, turn thedials to adjust the temperature.
Press the DUAL button. Theindicator in the button will come on.The driver and passenger can eachselect the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) to thedesired setting.
When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thedriver’s side temperature.
Only on models equipped withNavigation System
EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem
Except EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem
EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Voice Control System
Fan Control
Temperature Control
104
05/06/03 09:38:32 31SDA630 0107
Information Provided by:
When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.
This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).
Press the A/C button to turn theair conditioning on or off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe air conditioning is on.
Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. The displayshows ‘‘A/C ON’’ when the airconditioning is on. The displayshows ‘‘A/C OFF’’ when the airconditioning is off.
The display shows ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’after you press the A/C button. Thedisplay shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ after youtouch ‘‘ON’’ to turn the airconditioning on. The display shows‘‘A/C OFF’’ after you touch ‘‘OFF’’ toturn the air conditioning off.
When the A/C is off, the airflowtemperature does not fall below theoutside air temperature. When youset the airflow temperature lowerthan the outside air temperature,make sure the A/C is on.
72
EX-L and EX-V6Except EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem
EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Recirculation Button
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
105
05/06/03 09:38:42 31SDA630 0108
Information Provided by:
Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air flows from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the floorvents.
Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In these modes, the A/C stayson with the indicator off.
When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.
Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.
Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.
The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.
Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.
Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.
The system automaticallyturns on the A/C, selects ,and switches to recirculation mode.Each indicator above the button is onwhen the MAX A/C is turned on.
Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.3.4.
EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem
EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem
U.S. VP, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
Mode Control MAX A/C Button
Ventilation
Vents, Heating, and A/C
106
05/06/03 09:38:57 31SDA630 0109
Information Provided by:
▲ ▼
Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing theON button. The indicator in thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial or button is set tomaximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.
Press the A/C button, the ManualOperation A/C screen will appear.Select the ON icon on the display.Select the desired temperatureand MODE selections. If theoutside air is humid, select theRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.
Press the A/C button, the manualoperation of A/C screen willappear.Select the desired mode and fanspeed icons on the display.Adjust for warmth with thetemperature buttons ( or ).
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.
The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming through thesystem.
Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.3.
1.
2.3.
1.2.
3.
65
If the interior is very warm,
Except EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation
System
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemExcept EX-L and EX-V6
Using the Heater Using the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
107
05/06/03 09:39:08 31SDA630 0110
Information Provided by:
Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.
To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:
When you switch to , fromor mode, the A/C
stays on whether the indicator is onor off. This helps prevent thewindows from rapidly fogging upwhen the air is suddenly routed awayfrom the windshield. If you want toturn the A/C off, press and releasethe A/C button until the indicator inthe button comes on and then goesoff.
Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.
Turn the fan on.If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial or buttons to your preference.
This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2.
3.4.
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost
Vents, Heating, and A/C
108
05/06/03 09:39:17 31SDA630 0111
Information Provided by:
▲▼
Without Navigation System:
With Navigation System:For Vehicles with Navigation System
EX-L and EX-V6 Set thedesired temperature by turningthe Temperature Control dial. Youwill see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.
Press the AUTO button.
Set thedesired temperature by pressingthe to raise the temperature or
to lower the temperature. Theselected temperature will show inthe upper display.
The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.
Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on ifit was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.
1.
2.3.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Automatic Climate ControlTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows
Features
109
05/06/03 09:39:25 31SDA630 0112
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.
When the Climate Control System isturned OFF, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.
To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.
Keep the system off for shortperiods only.
If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off.
Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.
You can manually select variousfunctions of the automatic climatecontrol system when it is in AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled.
Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.
If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to turnoff.
The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air to raise or lower theinterior temperature to thetemperature you selected.
If you set the temperature to itslowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,(Hi) the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.
Whenthe indicator in the Dual button is on,the driver’s side and passenger’s sidetemperature can be controlledindependently (see page ).111
With Navigation SystemDual Temperature Control
EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem
Except EX and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Turn Everything OffManual Operation
110
05/06/03 09:39:37 31SDA630 0113
Information Provided by:
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
EX-L and EX-V6
Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the front passenger.
Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the passenger.
The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the green indicator in theDUAL button is lit.
Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the upperdisplay. For vehicles with navigationsystem, when the indicator in theDUAL button is off, you can adjustboth sides to the same temperatureby adjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control dial or buttons.
CONTINUED
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons
Features
111
DUAL BUTTON
Without Navigation System
DUAL BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS
With Navigation System
DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL
PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL
05/06/03 09:39:45 31SDA630 0114
Information Provided by:
▲ ▼
▲ ▼
To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial orpress the or buttons on thedriver’s side. To set the passenger’sside to a different value than thedriver’s, turn the passenger’s controldial or press the or buttons onthe passenger’s side. You can adjustthe passenger’s side withoutpressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
Dual Temperature Control
112
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
05/06/03 09:39:50 31SDA630 0115
Information Provided by:
The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.
If your vehicle has a climate controlsystem
Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor
Climate Control Sensors
Features
113
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
05/06/03 09:39:55 31SDA630 0116
Information Provided by:
Playing the Radio
114
SOUND BUTTON
SEEK BAR
TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR
SOUND BUTTON
AM/FMBUTTON
A.SELBUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
SCAN BUTTON AM/FMBUTTON
A.SELBUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR PRESET BARS
EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation SystemU.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
05/06/03 09:40:02 31SDA630 0117
Information Provided by:
Playing the Radio
Features
115
SEEK BAR
SCANBUTTON
PWR/VOLKNOB
UPPERDISPLAY
PRESETICONS
AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON
TUNE/SOUNDKNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FMBUTTON
AUDIOSELECTICON
SOUND ICONSCANICON
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
05/06/03 09:40:07 31SDA630 0118
Information Provided by:
-
-
You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars oricons.
Use the TUNE bar orknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar or turn the knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, and the
side or turn the knob to the leftto tune to a lower frequency.
The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.
The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theFM/AM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the PWR/VOL knob.
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.
The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the FM/AMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.
XM satellite radio information isavailable on page .
The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated using the voicecontrol system. See the Navi sectionin your Quick Start Guide for anoverview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.
135
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Only on models equipped withNavigation System
Playing the Radio
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
To Play the RadioVoice Control System
116
05/07/01 10:05:49 31SDA630 0119
Information Provided by:
--- Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar oricon and hold it until you hear abeep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.
Each preset bar or iconcan store one frequency on AM, andtwo frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar or icon.
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the preset icons.
Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.
The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about five seconds.
If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for five seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Playing the Radio
PresetSCAN
Features
117
05/06/03 09:40:24 31SDA630 0120
Information Provided by:
-
- If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsor icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset bars oricons as described previously.
press the A.SEL button or Auto Select icon. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.
Press the A. SEL button or touch theAuto Select icon. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It stores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbars (1 6) or icons. You will see a‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a presetbar or icon if Auto Select cannot finda strong station for every preset baror icon.
If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.
The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.
To turn off Auto Select,
Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT
118
05/06/03 09:40:29 31SDA630 0121
Information Provided by:
-
-
Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobor touch the icon to adjust thesetting to your liking. When the levelreaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’in the display.
The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. On vehicleswith navigation system, touch theRETURN icon to go back to theaudio screen.
Press the SOUND button or icon, orpress the TUNE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theSOUND icon or press the TUNEknob.
These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.
Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.
If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.
Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting.
Touch the left or right bars on thesound grid. Balance is equalizedwhen the vertical lines are centeredon the grid.
Touch the front or rear bars on thesound grid. The fader is equalizedwhen the horizontal lines arecentered on the grid.
For Vehicles without Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Playing the Radio
Features
119
05/06/03 09:40:38 31SDA630 0122
Information Provided by:
The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Playing the Radio
120
05/06/03 09:40:46 31SDA630 0123
Information Provided by:
Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.
Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.
Playing the Radio
Features
121
05/06/03 09:40:52 31SDA630 0124
Information Provided by:
Playing a CD
122
PWR/VOL KNOB
PWR/VOLKNOB
EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON
EJECTBUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIPBAR
SEEK/SKIPBAR
TRACKRPTICON
RANDOMICON
DISCRPTICON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD LOADINDICATOR
RDMBUTTON
CDBUTTON
SEEK/SKIPBAR
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
RDMBUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATORLOADBUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SCANBUTTON
LOADBUTTON
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
CHANGEDISCBUTTON
AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
PRESETBAR
PRESET BAR
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
05/06/03 09:41:02 31SDA630 0125
Information Provided by:
Playing a CD
Features
123
AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON
SEEK/SKIPBAR
CD LOADINDICATOR
CD BUTTON
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOLKNOB
LOADBUTTON
CD SLOT
CD LOAD INDICATOR
RANDOMICON
EJECTBUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
RDMBUTTON
EJECTBUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
CHANGEDISCBUTTON
TRACKRPTICON
DISC RPTICON
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
05/06/03 09:41:09 31SDA630 0126
Information Provided by:
To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.
To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX XMbutton.
To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player. The cassette player isoptional on all U.S. models.
If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.
To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.
Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.
For Vehicles without in-dash CDchanger
For Vehicles with Satellite RadioTo Play a CD
Playing a CD, CD Changer
124
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.
05/06/03 09:41:17 31SDA630 0127
Information Provided by:
- -
+
▲▼
Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay.The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redlight starts blinking.
When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, thesystem begins playing the last CDloaded.
You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the disc numberindicator is not highlighted) andpress the appropriate preset bar ortouch a disc icon. The current CDstops playing and starts the loadingsequence. The CD just loaded willplay.
You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display. Onvehicles with navigation system,these numbers also appear in theupper display.
To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )to select the previous disc or Preset6 (DISC ) to select the next disc insequence. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.
Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
125
05/06/03 09:41:25 31SDA630 0128
Information Provided by:
-
- -
-
-
-
-
For Vehicles without Navigation System EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemPress to play thetracks in random order. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.
The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded. To activate it, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display, and you willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the selected CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode.
To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button, the controlicons will appear on the screen.
Press the icon orSCAN button, to get a 10 secondsampling of each track on thecurrent CD. Press the icon or buttonagain to turn it off.
Touch to get a 10second sampling of the first song ofeach disc in the CD changer. Touchthe icon again to turn it off.
Touch tocontinuously play the same song onthe CD. Press the icon again to stopthe function.
Push the toplay the next track on the disc. Pushthe once to replay the track inplay; press it twice to replay theprevious track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold the
or button.
Press to continuouslyreplay a track. You will see RPT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.
RANDOM
SCAN TRACK SCAN
DISC SCAN
TRACK RPT
SEEK/SKIP
REPEAT
Playing a CD, CD Changer
126
05/06/03 09:41:34 31SDA630 0129
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
Touch the icon tocontinuously replay the current CD.Touch again to turn it off.
Touch the icon toplay the current CD in random order.Touch again to stop.
Selects an icon andplays the disc.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the AUX button to switch tothe tape while a CD is playing. Pressthe CD button again to switch backto the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, the CD will stay in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the CD will begin playingwhere it left off.
Press the AM/FM or XM/CDbutton to switch to the radio orsatellite radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button again to playthe CD.
Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.
To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar or icon. Whenthat CD begins playing, press theeject button. Continue pressing theEJECT button to remove all the discsfrom the changer.
To remove the disc currently playing,press the EJECT button. When adisc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.
For Vehicles with CD Player orChanger
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
DISC RPT
TRACK RDM
CH DISC
To Stop Playing a CD
Removing CDs from the Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
127
05/06/03 09:41:42 31SDA630 0130
Information Provided by:
-+
Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC
), for a previous disc; or Preset 6(DISC ), to select the next disc insequence.
If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.
On LX model, if there are no CDs inthe changer, the display will flash,and you will have to select anothermode.
An optional six or eight disc CDchanger is available for your vehiclefrom your dealer.This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer or the radio.
U.S. VP and LXCanadian DX-G and SE
Operating the Optional CDChanger
Playing a CD, CD Changer
128
05/06/03 09:41:48 31SDA630 0131
Information Provided by:
If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.
Cause SolutionError Message
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CDChangerHigh Temperature
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Insert CDs.
Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.
CD Player Error Messages
Features
129
05/06/03 09:41:54 31SDA630 0132
Information Provided by:
When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.
When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.
CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.
Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.
When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.
Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
130
05/06/03 09:42:04 31SDA630 0133
Information Provided by:
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
131
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON
CD/AUXBUTTON
RPTBUTTON
RPT INDICATOR
PRESET BARS
PROG ICON NR ICONRPT ICON
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIPBAR
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD/AUXBUTTON
SEEK BAR
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
UPPERDISPLAY
CH/DISCBAR
TUNE/SOUNDKNOB
RPT INDICATOR
CD/SAT RADIOBUTTON
SEEKBAR
PWR/VOLKNOB
TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
RPTBUTTON
PRESET BARS
US. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6
05/06/03 09:42:12 31SDA630 0134
Information Provided by:
▲
*
*
The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.
The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of the tape isplaying. The indicates the sideyou inserted upward in now playing.If you want to play the other side,press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or press theAUDIO DISPLAY button and touchthe PROG icon. When the playerreaches the end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.
Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thePreset 4 (NR) side of the preset baror touching the NR icon. Dolbyremains off until you press thepreset bar or the icon again.
Dolby noise reductionmanufactured under license fromDolby laboratories licensingCorporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof the Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.
To remove the tape, press theEJECT button on the cassette player.If you want to turn the player off,press the PWR/VOL knob or turnoff the ignition. The tape will remainin the drive.When you turn the system back on,the tape player will be in pause mode.Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or touch thePROG icon on vehicles withnavigation system to resume play.
To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/AUX XM button. To change back tothe tape player, push the CD/AUXbutton or CD/AUX XM button.
Optional on all U.S. modelsTo Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
132
05/06/03 09:42:19 31SDA630 0135
Information Provided by:
-
▲
▼
-
-▲
▼
-
To rewind the tape,push the Preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar or the upper side ( ) ofthe CH DISC bar. You will see REWin the display. To fast forward thetape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side ofthe preset bar. You will see FF dis-played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3side of the bars or the lower side( ) of the CH DISC bar to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.
Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.
To rewind the tapepush the upper side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. To fast forward the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. Press either side of thePROG icon in the audio display totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.
Press the RPT buttonor icon to continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button or icon again.
The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.
If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display, press thetape eject button to remove the tapefrom the unit. Make sure the tape isnot damaged. If the tape will noteject or the error message stays onafter the tape ejects, take yourvehicle to your dealer.
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation SystemTape Search FunctionsFF/REW
SKIP
FF/REW
REPEAT
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
133
NOTE:
05/06/03 09:42:26 31SDA630 0136
Information Provided by:
If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.
Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.
The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.
If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.
Caring for the Tape and Player
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
134
05/06/03 09:42:32 31SDA630 0137
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii, Alaska,and Canada.
XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.models only.
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Satellite Digital Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
135
DISPBUTTON
SAT RADIOBUTTON
SCANBUTTON
SCANBUTTON
TUNEKNOB
TUNEBARSEEK/
SKIP/BAR
CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR
CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR
MODE ICON
SCAN ICON
SEEK/SKIP/BAR
PWR/VOLKNOB
SAT RADIOBUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON
PRESETBARS
PRESETICONS
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6without Navigation System
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6with Navigation System
TM
TM
05/06/03 09:42:41 31SDA630 0138
Information Provided by:
--The ignition must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on:
Press the TUNE bar to changechannel selections. Press forhigher numbered channels and
for lower numbered channels.
Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.
Press and release this button tochange the display. The display willchange in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.
Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX XMbutton.
Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, orAUDIO button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.
When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of three methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
Vehicles without Navigation System
Vehicles without Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation System For Vehicles with Navigation SystemTo Play XM Satellite Radio TUNEDISP
To Select a Channel
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
136
TM
TM
05/06/03 09:42:51 31SDA630 0139
Information Provided by:
- -
-
CONTINUED
Theseek/skip function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, turn the TUNE knobclockwise or press the TUNE bar
.
The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of thesequence.
Each preset icon or buttoncan store one channel in XM1 andone in XM2.
Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired channel.Pick a preset icon or button andhold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on XM1 and XM2.
Once your XM channels are preset,pressing the CH DISC button willselect your preset channels.
Push the CD/AUX XM button.(You will see XM1 or XM2.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) SCAN
Preset
Features
137
TM
05/06/03 09:42:59 31SDA630 0140
Information Provided by:
Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.
The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Satellite Radio Signals
138
Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.
SATELLITE
GROUNDREPEATER
TM
05/06/03 09:43:04 31SDA630 0141
Information Provided by:
Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:
Driving on an east/west road witha mountain on the south side ofthe road.
There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.
Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.
Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.
If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the CD/AUX XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.
As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.
CONTINUED
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
139
TM
05/06/03 09:43:12 31SDA630 0142
Information Provided by:
While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the displayand you will be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.
If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the display.
After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSAT Radio mode while you awaitactivation. This should take about 30minutes.
www.xmradio.com
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
To get your XM Satellite radio IDnumber:
140
TM
05/06/03 09:43:18 31SDA630 0143
Information Provided by:
▲ ▼
+-
+
-+
-
The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.
If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.
If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.
The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.
If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.
Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.
U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Steering Wheel Controls
Features
141
MODE BUTTON
CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON
05/06/03 09:43:25 31SDA630 0144
Information Provided by:
-
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your Owner’s Manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.
If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knob tostore it.
If your vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.
If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.
If the code card is lost, a dealer canaccess your code with your radio’sserial number. To access the serialnumber, turn the radio on. It mustdisplay ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radiooff. Push the preset 1, preset 6, andpower buttons at the same time, thenquickly release.
You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) after the system beginsworking. Your original settings werelost when power was disconnected.
If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit is displayed.Press and release the TUNE knob tostore it. Enter the remaining three
digits the same way.
If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.
You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.
Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code usingthe preset bars or the TUNE knob.Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five digits, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.
Except U.S. VP and LXExcept Canadian DX-G and SE
Radio Theft Protection
142
05/06/03 09:43:33 31SDA630 0145
Information Provided by:
You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Pressing and holdingthe SOUND button, then pressingthe R (Preset 6) side of the bar setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.
For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
Refer to the Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to set up the time.
Press and hold the SOUND buttonuntil you hear a beep. The displayedtime begins to blink. Press on the H(Preset 4) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing theM (Preset 5) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.When you are finished, press theSOUND button again to set the time.
If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.
For Vehicles without Navigation System
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Setting the Clock
Features
143
DIGITAL CLOCK
SOUND BUTTON
PRESET BARS
For Vehicles without Navigation System
05/06/03 09:43:40 31SDA630 0146
Information Provided by:
The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemlight on the instrument panel startsblinking immediately to show youthe system is setting itself.
Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.
The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page ), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.
Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.
With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release leveror the emergency trunk opener.
60
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Security System
144
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
05/06/03 09:43:47 31SDA630 0147
Information Provided by:
Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.
Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
1.
2.
3.Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
145
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCELBUTTON
RES/ACCELBUTTON
DECEL/SETBUTTON
Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.
05/06/03 09:43:54 31SDA630 0148
Information Provided by:
The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will come back on.
You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.
To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton.
Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
146
05/06/03 09:44:03 31SDA630 0149
Information Provided by:
When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle will accelerateto the same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the Cruise Control MasterButton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.
Push the cruise control masterbutton.
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
147
05/06/03 09:44:09 31SDA630 0150
Information Provided by:
-
To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.
The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.
If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.
Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.
For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.
If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.
If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.
Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 2 to 5 inches fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.
1.
2.
If equipped Training HomeLink
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
148
05/06/03 09:44:19 31SDA630 0151
Information Provided by:
Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1
second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.
Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.
If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.
Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).
If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).
If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.
Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
150
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
149
05/06/03 09:44:30 31SDA630 0152
Information Provided by:
For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.
Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.
Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.
Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.
Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
Training With a Rolling CodeSystem
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
150
TRAINING BUTTON
05/06/03 09:44:38 31SDA630 0153
Information Provided by:
You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.
To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:
If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.
HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.
Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.
1.
2.
148
As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
151
05/06/03 09:44:49 31SDA630 0154
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.
.............................Break-in Period . 154.................Fuel Recommendation . 154
.........Service Station Procedures . 156....................................Refueling . 156
Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 157
...................................Oil Check . 159.............Engine Coolant Check . 160
...............................Fuel Economy . 161........Improving Fuel Economy . 161
...Accessories and Modifications . 162................................Accessories . 162
...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 163.Additional Safety Precautions . 163
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164................................Load Limits . 165
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk.................or on a Roof Rack . 166
Carrying Items in the.....Passenger Compartment . 166
Before Driving
Before
Driving
153
05/06/03 09:44:55 31SDA630 0156
Information Provided by:
Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.
Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.
In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.
You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.
We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.
Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.
For vehicles with manual transmission
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
154
05/06/03 09:45:05 31SDA630 0157
Information Provided by:
Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your
.
Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Before
Driving
155
05/06/03 09:45:09 31SDA630 0158
Information Provided by:
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.
Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.
To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.
even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.
3.
4.
1.
2.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Refueling
Service Station Procedure
156
FUEL FILL CAP
Push
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.
05/06/03 09:45:17 31SDA630 0159
Information Provided by:
To Open the Hood:Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.
Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.
Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,
may come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the odometer/outside temperature display.
Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.
1.2.
5.
6.
251
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedure
Before
Driving
157
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
05/06/07 17:18:58 31SDA630 0160
the malfunction indicator lamp
Information Provided by:
4-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood near thecenter.
To Close the Hood:
Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.
Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)above the fender, then press downfirmly with your hands. Make sure itis securely latched.
Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.
3.
Service Station Procedure
158
SUPPORT ROD
6-cylinder models4-cylinder models
05/06/03 09:45:33 31SDA630 0161
Information Provided by:
Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.
Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .
Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).
1.
2.
3.
4.
204
Oil Check
Adding Oil
Service Station Procedure
Before
Driving
159
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK(orange handle)
DIPSTICK(orange loop)
05/07/01 10:06:01 31SDA630 0162
Information Provided by:
Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see
on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.
Refer toon page for information
about checking other items on yourvehicle.
209
198
Engine Coolant Check
AddingEngine Coolant
Owner’s MaintenanceChecks
Service Station Procedure
160
UPPER MARKLOWER MARK
RESERVE TANK
4-cylinder models
MIN
MAX
MAX RESERVE TANK
6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models
05/07/01 10:06:10 31SDA630 0163
Information Provided by:
Always drive in the highest gearpossible.
Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.
Combine several short trips intoone.
The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.
Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.
an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.
Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceminder. See
(see page).198
For example,
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’sMaintenance Checks
Fuel Economy
Before
Driving
161
05/07/01 10:06:19 31SDA630 0164
Information Provided by:
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.
Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.
When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.
Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.
Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see next pagefor additional information).
257
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
162
Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.
Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.
05/06/03 09:46:04 31SDA630 0165
Information Provided by:
Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.
Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.
Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.
If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.
This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.
Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.
Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.
Accessories and Modifications
Before
Driving
163
05/06/03 09:46:13 31SDA630 0166
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the back seatswhen folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.
Carrying Cargo
164
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
05/06/03 09:46:21 31SDA630 0167
Information Provided by:
- ×The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.
Steps for determining correct loadlimit:
Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]
Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.
The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).
1.
2.
5.
6.
3.
4.
184
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
Before
Driving
165
Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.
05/06/03 09:46:30 31SDA630 0168
Information Provided by:
Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.
If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of
, follow the instructionson page .
If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.
In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers andaccessories must not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). Both are on a labelon the driver’s doorjamb.
Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.
Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or the advanced frontairbags.
Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.
52
Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment
carbon monoxidepoisoning
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
166
05/06/03 09:46:38 31SDA630 0169
Information Provided by:
This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the tractioncontrol system, and facts you need ifyou are planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 168.......................Starting the Engine . 169
...................Manual Transmission . 170.....Recommended Shift Points . 171
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 172.......................Reverse Lockout . 172
..............Automatic Transmission . 173Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 173.......................................Shifting . 173
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 175....................Shift Lock Release . 176
...........................................Parking . 178..............................Parking Tips . 178.............................Braking System . 179
...............Brake System Design . 179.............Brake Wear Indicators . 179
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 180Activating the Anti-lock
....................................Brakes . 180............................ABS Indicator . 180
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 182
.........VSA Activation Indicator . 182..............VSA System Indicator . 182
.........................VSA Off Switch . 183
...........................Towing a Trailer . 184
Driving
Driving
167
05/06/03 09:46:42 31SDA630 0170
Information Provided by:
You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.
Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).
Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.
Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.
Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (seepages to ).
Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepages and ).
When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see pages to
).
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
10.
58
16
85 87
90 91
73
66
Preparing to Drive
168
05/06/03 09:46:52 31SDA630 0171
Information Provided by:
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.
Turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START (III) for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start right away,pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.
If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. Returnto step 5 if the engine does notstart.
Push the clutch pedal down all theway.
Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
75
Starting the Engine
Driving
169
The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .
The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.
05/06/03 09:47:00 31SDA630 0172
Information Provided by:
The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directly
from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth (see page ).
When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Avoidskipping gears when shifting up ordown or serious transmissiondamage can occur. When you are notshifting, do not rest your foot on theclutch pedal. This can cause yourclutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Failure to make sure theengine speed will not go into thetachometer’s red zone in a lowergear can cause serious enginedamage.
172On all 4-cylinder models with 5-speedmanual transmissionOn all 6-cylinder models with 6-speedmanual transmission
Manual Transmission
170
5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T
05/06/03 09:47:07 31SDA630 0173
Information Provided by:
Shift up
1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)
Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:
With 5-speed manual transmission
With 6-speed manual transmissionRecommended Shift Points
Manual Transmission
Driving
171
Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.
05/06/03 09:47:13 31SDA630 0174
Information Provided by:
If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.
The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth while the vehicle is moving. Ifyou cannot shift to Reverse when thevehicle is stopped:
With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.
Press the clutch pedal, and shift toReverse.
If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.
If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone. The EngineSpeed Limiter only limits enginespeed when the accelerator is used.Attempting to reduce engine speedby shifting into a lower gear from ahigh speed can seriously damage theengine.
Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-speed manual transmission onlyEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission
172
05/06/03 09:47:23 31SDA630 0175
Information Provided by:
If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from any position, press therelease button on the bottom of theshift lever to move it. You cannotshift out of Park when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY position (I).
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.
These indicators between the tacho-meter and speedometer show whichposition the shift lever is in.
To shift from:P to R
R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2
2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N
Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
173
SHIFT LEVER
05/06/03 09:47:30 31SDA630 0176
Information Provided by:
- -
-
-
-
If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .
You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.
Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to Reverse. To shiftfrom Reverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift.
This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.
Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.
Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromNeutral to another gear.
This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shiftout of Park, you must press on thebrake pedal and have your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Press therelease button on the bottom of theshift lever to move it.
176
3
3
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R) Drive (D )
Drive (D)
Neutral (N)
Park (P) 3
Automatic Transmission
174
05/06/03 09:47:37 31SDA630 0177
Information Provided by:
- -This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with atrailer.
If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.
To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on thebottom of the shift lever. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.
3
Second (2) Engine Speed LimiterFirst (1)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
175
05/06/03 09:47:44 31SDA630 0178
Information Provided by:
Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or finger nailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry off the edge of the cover.
Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.
Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.
Set the parking brake.1.
2.
3.
4.Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
176
COVER
05/06/03 09:47:51 31SDA630 0179
Information Provided by:
Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.
Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
177
RELEASEBUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
05/06/03 09:47:55 31SDA630 0180
Information Provided by:
Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.
Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.
Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.
If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.
Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Parking Tips
Parking
178
05/06/03 09:48:05 31SDA630 0181
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.
Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.
Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.
Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, builds up heat,increases wear and reduces theireffectiveness. It also keeps yourbrake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.
The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.
In all models, the front disc brakeshave audible brake wear indicators.In all models except the U.S. VP, U.S.LX and Canadian DX-G, the rear discbrakes have audible brake wearindicators.
Brake Wear Indicators
Braking System Design
Braking System
Driving
179
05/06/03 09:48:12 31SDA630 0182
Information Provided by:
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.
You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.
You should never pump the brake pedal;
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
180
05/06/03 09:48:19 31SDA630 0183
Information Provided by:
Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.
such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down, and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.
253
ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.
ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.
A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
181
ABS INDICATOR
05/06/03 09:48:25 31SDA630 0184
Information Provided by:
When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink. Theremay also be some unusual noisefrom the modulator.
When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some unusual noise from themodulator.
The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.The Vehicle Stability Assist system
helps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the vehicle turns moreor less than desired. It also assistsyou in maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying the brakes.
If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
182
VSA SYSTEMINDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR
05/06/03 09:48:34 31SDA630 0185
Information Provided by:
Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.
VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.
Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).
Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.
When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.
If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.
This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.
231
238
VSA Off Switch
VSA and Tire Sizes
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
Driving
183
VSA OFF SWITCH
05/06/03 09:48:42 31SDA630 0186
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.
Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everthing in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.
The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.
Towing a Trailer
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
184
Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.
Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.
05/06/03 09:48:48 31SDA630 0187
Information Provided by:
To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.
The total weight of each axle mustnot exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:
U.S. VP and LX:Canadian DX-G:
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatictransmission:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6 withautomatic transmission:
U.S. EX-V6 with manual transmission:Canadian EX-V6 with manualtransmission:
U.S. VP and LX:Canadian DX-G:
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:
U.S. EX, EX-L and SE:Canadian SE and EX-L:
U.S. EX-L and SE:Canadian SE and EX-L:
Towing a Trailer
Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):
Driving
185
4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg)
4,145 Ibs (1,880 kg)
4,345 Ibs (1,970 kg)
4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)
1,960 Ibs (890 kg)on the rear axle
2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)on the front axle1,985 Ibs (900 kg)on the rear axle
2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg)on the front axle2,005 Ibs (910 kg)on the rear axle
2,195 Ibs (995 kg)on the front axle
05/06/03 09:48:53 31SDA630 0188
Information Provided by:
Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Honda equipmentwhenever possible.
Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.
The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale. To locate the public scales inyour area, consult your local yellowpages or ask your dealer forassistance.
Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.
Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.
Towing a Trailer
Hitches
Safety Chains
Towing Equipment andAccessories
Checking Loads
186
05/06/03 09:49:02 31SDA630 0189
Information Provided by:
Many states and provinces requirespecial outside mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.
Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, andregulations. Check with your localtrailer sales or rental agency for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.
Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.
Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer LightsTrailer Brakes
Driving
187
05/06/03 09:49:09 31SDA630 0190
Information Provided by:
When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:
The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.
All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.
The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.
All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).
Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.
The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.
For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.
Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.
184 186
227Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
188
05/06/03 09:49:18 31SDA630 0191
Information Provided by:
Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.
D is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain.
When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.
Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.
Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.
3
bottom
Towing a Trailer
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Backing Up
Parking
Driving
189
05/06/03 09:49:27 31SDA630 0192
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.
This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages, amaintenance record, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.
If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 192....................Maintenance Minder . 193....................Maintenance Record . 200
..............................Fluid Locations . 202........................Adding Engine Oil . 204
.......Recommended Engine Oil . 204..............................Synthetic Oil . 205
................Engine Oil Additives . 205.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 206
....................Windshield Washers . 208..............................Engine Coolant . 209
............Adding Engine Coolant . 209.......................Transmission Fluid . 211
Automatic.........................Transmission . 211
Manual.........................Transmission . 214
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 215................................Brake Fluid . 216...............................Clutch Fluid . 216
....................Power Steering Fluid . 216....................................Timing Belt . 217
.............................................Lights . 218.......................................Seat Belts . 224.....................................Floor Mats . 224
.................................Wiper Blades . 225
...............................................Tires . 227..................Inflation Guidelines . 227
Recommended Tire...............................Pressures . 228
..........................Tire Inspection . 229.....................Tire Maintenance . 229
.............................Tire Rotation . 230.........................Replacing Tires . 231
......................Wheels and Tires . 231..........................Winter Driving . 232
.............................Snow Tires . 232............................Tire Chains . 232
...................Checking the Battery . 234.............................Vehicle Storage . 235
281
Maintenance
Maintenance
191
05/07/01 10:06:26 31SDA630 0194
Information Provided by:
All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.
To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.
To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenworking near the battery orwhen using compressed air.
Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.
Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.
Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.
Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
192
Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.
Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.
05/06/03 09:49:44 31SDA630 0195
Information Provided by:
------------
CONTINUED
Calculated EngineOil Life (%)
100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %
0 %
DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)
100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %
Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items in theinformation display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.
To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe Select/Reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life displayappears (see page ).
The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to this table:
64
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Indicator
Maintenance
193
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET KNOB
05/07/01 10:29:46 31SDA630 0196
Information Provided by:
When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.
The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).
If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.
199
Maintenance Minder
194
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
05/07/01 10:29:53 31SDA630 0197
Information Provided by:
-
When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill be blinking. The display comeson every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.
If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0 percentmessage. Afterward, it shows yourdriving distance if you continue todrive. Immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.
The maximum total mileage shownis ‘‘ 9999.’’
You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life display is 0percent or negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.
Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described in the nextpage.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
195
05/07/01 10:30:02 31SDA630 0198
Information Provided by:
Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the odometer/trip meter display the next time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.
When the vehicle needsmaintenance, maintenance codesappear on the information display.
For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .
Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.
If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:
Press the Select/Reset knob untilthe engine oil life indicator isdisplayed.
Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 10 seconds. The engineoil life indicator and themaintenance item code(s) willblink.
3.
1.
2.
199
Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator
Maintenance Main Items and SubItems
Maintenance Minder
196
ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE
05/07/01 10:30:13 31SDA630 0199
Information Provided by:
If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.
We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.
Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance items code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’
4.
CONTINUED
Important MaintenancePrecautions
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
197
05/07/01 10:30:21 31SDA630 0200
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
-
-
-
#
U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.
Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .
Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .
Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .
Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page
.
According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display.
159
160
215
227
218
211
Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance Minder
198
05/07/01 10:30:33 31SDA630 0201
Information Provided by:
*
*
#
#
--
#
*
Maintenance Minder
199
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
:
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Symbol1
1
If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.
NOTE:
1 :
197
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speedsor trailer towing results in higher transmission andtransfer temperatures. This requires transmission andtransfer fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, havethe transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)(For A/T only:)
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada).
Main
tenance
Min
der
05/07/01 10:30:41 31SDA630 0202
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Record
200
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle.
MaintenancePerformed
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
Signature
Date
MaintenancePerformed
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
05/07/01 10:30:49 31SDA630 0203
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
201
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
MaintenancePerformed
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
Signature
Date
MaintenancePerformed
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
A B 1 2 3 4 5
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
05/07/01 10:30:56 31SDA630 0204
Information Provided by:
4-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
202
BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)
WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)
POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OILFILL CAP
AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)
COOLANTRESERVOIR
05/07/01 10:31:02 31SDA630 0205
Information Provided by:
6-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
203
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)
COOLANTRESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)
WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)
CLUTCH FLUID(6-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)
05/07/01 10:31:08 31SDA630 0206
Information Provided by:
Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.
Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.
Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
204
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
6-cylinder models4-cylinder models
05/07/01 10:31:16 31SDA630 0207
Information Provided by:
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.
The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.
You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
205
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
05/07/01 10:31:26 31SDA630 0208
Information Provided by:
Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.
Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,then shut it off.
Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.
Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenanceminder (see page ). The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.
Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.
3.2.
1.
193
4.
Changing the Oil and Filter
206
WASHER
4-cylinder models
WASHER
6-cylinder models
OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT
05/07/01 10:31:35 31SDA630 0209
Information Provided by:
Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.
Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity(including filter):(4-cylinder models)
(6-cylinder models)
Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.
(6-cylinder models)
(4-cylinder models)
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:
Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.
9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
10.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
207
OIL FILTER
6-cylinder models
OIL FILTER
4-cylinder models
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)
Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.
05/07/01 10:31:50 31SDA630 0210
Information Provided by:
Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.
When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.
Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.
The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).63
Canadian Models:
Windshield Washers
208
LEVEL GAUGE
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.
05/07/01 10:32:00 31SDA630 0211
Information Provided by:
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
209
6-cylinder models RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK4-cylinder models
Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.
05/07/01 10:32:09 31SDA630 0212
Information Provided by:
The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.
Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.
Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.
Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.
4.1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
210
6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP
4-cylinder models
05/07/01 10:32:21 31SDA630 0213
Information Provided by:
4-cylinder models
Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.
Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.
Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.
If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
211
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
05/07/01 10:32:35 31SDA630 0214
Information Provided by:
To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page
). Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.
Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.
Make sure the rubber cap fits inthe dipstick guide and the dipstickis down all the way.
1.
2.
6.
193
4.
3.
6-cylinder models
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
212
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
05/07/01 10:32:48 31SDA630 0215
Information Provided by:
If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.
Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger.
5.
4-cylinder models
Transmission Fluid
5-speed Manual Transmission
Maintenance
213
FILLER BOLT
Correct level
05/07/01 10:32:58 31SDA630 0216
Information Provided by:
The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.
Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.
If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.
193
EX-V6
Transmission Fluid
6-speed Manual Transmission
214
CHECK BOLT
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
FILLER BOLT
05/07/01 10:33:07 31SDA630 0217
Information Provided by:
Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill. Clean up any spill immediately;it could damage components in theengine compartment.
If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:
Replace the brake fluid according tothe maintenance minder (see page
).
Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)
193
193
CONTINUED
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
215
05/07/01 10:33:20 31SDA630 0218
Information Provided by:
The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.
Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.
The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.
Manual transmission modelsBrake Fluid Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
216
MAX
MIN
MAX
MAX
UPPER LEVEL
4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL
05/07/01 10:33:32 31SDA630 0219
Information Provided by:
- -Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.
The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the maintenanceminder (see page ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:
Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.
In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently tow a trailer.
193
6-cylinder modelsTiming Belt
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Maintenance
217
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
6-cylinder models
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.
05/07/01 10:33:42 31SDA630 0220
Information Provided by:
The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be performed by your dealeror other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has two bulbs on eachside, four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your vehicle uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
218
NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.
05/06/03 09:52:53 31SDA630 0221
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Open the hood. To change a bulbon the passenger’s side, undo thetwo fasteners and remove the airintake cover.
Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.
1. 3.2.
4.
Lights
High Beam Headlight
Maintenance
219
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models TAB
BULBAIR INTAKECOVER
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models
AIR INTAKECOVER
05/06/03 09:53:02 31SDA630 0222
Information Provided by:
Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.
To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.
Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.
Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.
Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.
Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.
Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.
6.
5. 3.
4.
5.
1.
2.7.
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
220
HOLDING CLIPS
TAB
BULB
6-cylinder models BULB
05/06/03 09:53:11 31SDA630 0223
Information Provided by:
Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.
Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.
Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.
Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.
To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.
Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1. 3.
2.
4.
8.
7.
6.
9.
CONTINUED
Lights
Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal and Parking LightBulb
Maintenance
221
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
05/06/03 09:53:21 31SDA630 0224
Information Provided by:
To remove the burned out bulb,push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb and turn itclockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.
Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.
Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.
Set the lining back.
Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.
Open the trunk.
Remove the holding clips from thelining by using a flat-tippedscrewdriver.
Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
1.
4.
3.
5.
6.
Lights
Replacing Rear Turn Signal LightBulbs
222
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
SOCKET
05/06/03 09:53:32 31SDA630 0225
Information Provided by:
Open the trunk.
Remove the trim clips from theright or left corner of the trunk lidtrim by carefully prying themusing a small, flat-tip screwdriverwrapped with tape.
Carefully bend back the corner ofthe trunk lid trim to expose thebulbs.
Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.
Install a new bulb into the socket,and reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.
Test the light.
Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.
Press the trim clips back into theirholes.
1. 3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
6-cylinder models
Lights
Replacing Back-up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
223
TRIM CLIPS BULB
SOCKET SOCKETBULB
05/06/03 09:53:42 31SDA630 0226
Information Provided by:
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.
If you use aftermarket floor matsmake sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.
Clean dirty seat belts with a softbrush and a mixture of mild soap andwarm water. Do not use bleach, dye,or cleaning solvents that can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the vehicle.
If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.
The driver’s and right rear floormats that came with your vehiclehook over the floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals ormarking the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.
Seat Belts Floor Mats
Seat Belts, Floor Mats
224
LOOP
05/06/03 09:53:49 31SDA630 0227
Information Provided by:
Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
225
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.
05/06/03 09:53:55 31SDA630 0228
Information Provided by:
Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.
Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
226
BLADE BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
05/06/03 09:54:02 31SDA630 0229
Information Provided by:
Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.
We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced. Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.
Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.
Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride harshly, are moreprone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
Maintenance
227
Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.
05/06/03 09:54:10 31SDA630 0230
Information Provided by:
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.
The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.
You should get your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.
The compact spare tire pressure is:
For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .268
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
U.S. VP
Rear:
Front:
U.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
1 :2 :
3 :
4 :
1
2
3
4
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tires
228
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )
P195/65R15 89HP205/60R16 91V
P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )
P215/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )
05/06/03 09:54:24 31SDA630 0231
Information Provided by:
Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.
In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.
Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.
Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.
A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.
Excessive tread wear.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.
Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
229
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
05/06/03 09:54:39 31SDA630 0232
Information Provided by:
To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed inthe odometer/outside temperaturedisplay. Move the tires to thepositions shown in the chart eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.
U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6All Canadian models
Tire Rotation
Tires
230
(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)
Front Front
(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheels weights f orbalancing.
05/06/07 17:19:24 31SDA630 0233
Information Provided by:
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.
Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).
If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:
U.S. VP and LX:Canadian DX-G:
Wheels
U.S. SE, EX and EX-L:Canadian SE and EX-L:
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheels and Tires
Maintenance
231
15 x 6 1/2 JJ
16 x 6 1/2 JJ
17 x 6 1/2 JJ
Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.
Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.
05/06/03 09:54:52 31SDA630 0234
Information Provided by:
+
See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page
for tire size information.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.
Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).
TiresU.S. VP:
U.S. LX:
U.S. SE, EX and EX-L:Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L:
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:
269
271
Tires
Snow Tires
Tire ChainsWinter Driving
232
P195/65R15 89H
P205/65R15 92H
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
05/06/03 09:55:02 31SDA630 0235
Information Provided by:
When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
Cable-type: SCC SZ 134
U.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
U.S. VP and LX
Tires
Maintenance
233
Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.
05/07/01 10:33:49 31SDA630 0236
The chains listed above areavailable at most retail parts and accessory stores that carry SCC Products.
The SCC SZ 134 chain is availablefrom your dealer as a GenuineHonda Accessory (part number08W40-SDA-SZ134).
Information Provided by:
-Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.
Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.
If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified mechanic.
Checking the Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
234
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
4-cylinder models
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
6-cylinder models
05/06/03 09:55:14 31SDA630 0237
Information Provided by:
If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.
Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.
Vehicle Storage
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
235
The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.
A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.
05/06/03 09:55:20 31SDA630 0238
Information Provided by:
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.
Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(manual transmission) or Park(automatic transmission).
Vehicle Storage
236
05/06/03 09:55:27 31SDA630 0239
Information Provided by:
This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 238....................Changing a Flat Tire . 239
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 243Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates
............................Very Slowly . 243The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 244
................................Jump Starting . 245..............If the Engine Overheats . 248
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 250..........Charging System Indicator . 251
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251.......................Readiness Codes . 252
...............Brake System Indicator . 253..................Closing the Moonroof . 254
......................Emergency Towing . 255..............................................Fuses . 257
..............................Fuse Locations . 260
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
237
05/06/03 09:55:31 31SDA630 0240
Information Provided by:
Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.
Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.
Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.
Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.
Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.
Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.
Turn off the VSA system (seepages and ). Driving withthe compact spare tire mayactivate the VSA.
On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.
182 183
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
Compact Spare Tire
238
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
05/06/03 09:55:41 31SDA630 0241
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.
The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.
Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.
If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
239
TRUNK FLOOR
SPARE TIRE
JACK
TOOL KIT
The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.
Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.
05/06/03 09:55:49 31SDA630 0242
Information Provided by:
The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.
Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.
Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.
6. 7.
8.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
240
JACK JACKING POINT
05/06/03 09:55:56 31SDA630 0243
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.
Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surface ofthe wheel facing up.
Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.
10. 12.
11.
If a wheel cover is equipped
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
241
WHEEL WRENCH
EXTENSION
BRAKE HUB
05/06/03 09:56:02 31SDA630 0244
Information Provided by:
Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.
Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.
Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.
Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.
15.13.
14.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Changing a Flat Tire
242
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
05/06/03 09:56:12 31SDA630 0245
Information Provided by:
Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:
When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.
Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged. You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.
Check these things:21.
245CONTINUED
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
243
Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.
05/06/03 09:56:21 31SDA630 0246
Information Provided by:
In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to
on page .
Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.
There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).
If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery connections (see page
). You can then try jumpstarting the vehicle from a boosterbattery (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified mechanic todetermine the problem (see
on page ).If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified mechanic to find theproblem. Seeon page .
255
234
245
169
75
257
255
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting theEngine
Emergency TowingEmergency Towing
244
05/06/03 09:56:28 31SDA630 0247
Information Provided by:
Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.
To jump start your vehicle:
You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustration showthe order to connect the jumpercable.
Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
245
BOOSTERBATTERY
4-cylinder models
A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.
05/06/03 09:56:38 31SDA630 0248
Information Provided by:
-
+
+
Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.
Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.
4.
3.
Jump Starting
246
4-cylinder models
BOOSTERBATTERY
6-cylinder models
05/06/03 09:56:43 31SDA630 0249
Information Provided by:
If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.
7.
6.
5.
Jump Starting
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
247
6-cylinder models
05/06/03 09:56:48 31SDA630 0250
Information Provided by:
If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see
on page ).
The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
255Emergency
Towing
If the Engine Overheats
248
Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.
Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.
05/06/07 17:19:32 31SDA630 0251
Information Provided by:
Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.
Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.
Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.
If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.
7.
6. 8.
9.
10.
11.
255Emergency
Towing
If the Engine Overheats
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
249
Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.
05/06/03 09:57:03 31SDA630 0252
Information Provided by:
Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page
).
This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.
Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
159
255
204
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
250
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.
05/07/01 10:33:58 31SDA630 0253
Information Provided by:
Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.
If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.
If the indicator comes on whiledriving, it means one of the engine’semission control systems may have aproblem. Even though you may feelno difference in your vehicle’sperformance, continued operationmay cause serious damage.
CONTINUED
Malfunction Indicator LampCharging System Indicator
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
251
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
05/06/03 09:57:18 31SDA630 0254
Information Provided by:
If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, these
conditions to set the codes again.
If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn off
days of normal driving.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to
for moreinformation (see page ).275
Readiness Codes
StateEmissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
252
If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
05/06/03 09:57:24 31SDA630 0255
immediately; it can take several
codes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under various
Information Provided by:
However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.
If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your dealerimmediately.
If this indicator comes on whiledriving, the brake fluid level isprobably low in the reservoir. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page
). If the fluid level is low, takethe vehicle to your dealer and havethe brake system inspected for leaksor worn brake pads.
If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see
on page ).
215
255Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
253
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. models shown
05/06/03 09:57:30 31SDA630 0256
Information Provided by:
Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.
Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.
Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.
If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.
Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.
Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.
Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.
If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:
5.
6.
4.
3.
1.
2.
257
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
Closing the Moonroof
254
ROUND PLUG SOCKET
05/06/03 09:57:39 31SDA630 0257
Information Provided by:
-
-
If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.
The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.
There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:
If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.
With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.
Turn off the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Start the engine.Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.
Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
CONTINUED
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lif t Equipment
This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.
This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.
Emergency Towing
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
255
Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.
05/06/07 17:21:51 31SDA630 0258
Information Provided by:
Emergency Towing
256
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.
05/06/07 17:21:54 31SDA630 0259
Information Provided by:
The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.
The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.
If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fusebox.
1.
2.
261260
CONTINUED
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
257
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD
TAB
05/06/03 09:58:02 31SDA630 0260
Information Provided by:
Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.
Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.
Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned out, replace itwith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.
3. 4.
5.
Fuses
258
BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN
05/06/03 09:58:08 31SDA630 0261
Information Provided by:
If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.
6.
Fuses
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
259
FUSE PULLER
Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.
05/06/03 09:58:12 31SDA630 0262
Information Provided by:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
+
*
*
*
*
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
U.S. EX, EX-L LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6Except Canadian DX-G
1 :
2 :
3 :
4 :
1234567
10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A
Left Headlight Low(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight HiRight Headlight LowBack Up
89
1011
1213
15 A20 A
20 A30 A7.5 A20 A
FI ECUCondenser fanNot UsedCooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, Stop
14151617
18
19202122
23
40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A40 A
100 A
50 A50 A
Rear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorVSA MotorABS F/SVSA MotorDriver’s Power SeatPassenger’s Power SeatHeater MotorBatteryNot Used
B IG1 MainPower Window Main
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
Fuse Locations
260
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
05/06/03 09:58:21 31SDA630 0263
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
U.S. modelsU.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
1 :2 :
3 :
12345678
(15 A)15 A
(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A10 A20 A
Drive by WireIgnition CoilDay LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior LightBack-Up LightsDoor Lock
910111213
1415
15 A7.5 A30 A
(20 A)
(20 A)(20 A)
Front Accessory SocketsIG OPDSIG WiperNot UsedPassenger’s Power SeatReclineDriver’s Power Seat SlideHeated Seat
161718192021222324252627282930313233
(20 A)(20 A)15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A
(20 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A7.5 A
Driver’s Power Seat ReclinePassenger’s Power Seat SlideIG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC OP
2
2
2
2
2
3
Fuse Locations
Taking
Care
ofthe
Unexpected
261
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
05/06/03 09:58:29 31SDA630 0264
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 264................................Specifications . 266
DOT Tire Quality Grading.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 269
Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 269.................................Treadwear . 269
......................................Traction . 269.............................Temperature . 270
.................................Tire Labeling . 271.......................Emissions Controls . 272.....................The Clean Air Act . 272
Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 272
Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 272
Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 272
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 273....................PGM-FI System . 273
Ignition Timing Control................................System . 273
Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 273
Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 273
....................Replacement Parts . 273..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 274
..............State Emissions Testing . 275
Technical Information
TechnicalInform
ation
263
05/06/03 09:58:35 31SDA630 0266
Information Provided by:
The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on theCertification label.
Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.
Identif ication Numbers
264
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
05/06/03 09:58:39 31SDA630 0267
Information Provided by:
The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped onthe front of the engine block.
Identif ication Numbers
4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models
TechnicalInform
ation
265
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER
ENGINENUMBER
05/06/03 09:58:46 31SDA630 0268
Information Provided by:
- -- -
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Specifications
266
Dimensions
Air Conditioning
Weights
Capacities
Capacities
189.5 in (4,813 mm)71.7 in (1,820 mm)57.2 in (1,453 mm)
HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)16 18 oz (450 500 g)
ND-OIL8
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
107.9 in (2,740 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)
LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack
Refrigerant typeCharge quantity
Lubricant type
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.
Fuel tank
Enginecoolant 1.35 US gal (5.1 )
1.32 US gal (5.0 )1.77 US gal (6.7 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.22 US gal (8.4 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )4.5 US qt (4.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.0 US qt (1.9 )
2.2 US qt (2.1 )
3.1 US qt (2.9 )3.2 US qt (3.0 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )7.4 US qt (7.0 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Engine oil
Manual trans-mission oil
Automatictransmissionfluid
Windshieldwasherreservoir
2.3 US qt (2.2 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
6-cylinder modelsApprox.
FrontRear
2 :
3 :
ChangeManualAutomatic
TotalManualAutomatic
ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S.Canada
1 :
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
05/06/03 09:59:04 31SDA630 0269
Information Provided by:
*
*
*
---
---------
---
*
*
*
CONTINUED
Specifications
TechnicalInform
ation
267
Lights Battery
Fuses
12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2.2 CP
12 V 21 W
Headlights
Front turn signal/Front parking lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightVanity mirror lights
12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V
21 W3 CP8 W8 W8 W5 W2 CP1.1 W
Capacity 12 V12 V12 V
36 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR52 AH/5 HR
Interior
Under-hood
See page 261 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 260 or the fuse boxcover.
HighLow 4-cylinder
6-cylinder
U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6Canadian SE and SE-V6U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
1 :
2 :
3 :
1
2
3
05/06/03 09:59:21 31SDA630 0270
Information Provided by:
-
***
***
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
* *
* *
* *
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
* *
* *
Specifications
268
Engine
Alignment
Tires
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm )182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )
9.7 : 110 : 1
IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11IZFR6K-13SKJ20DR-M13
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°1°
3°15’
Size
Pressure
P195/65R15 89H
T135/90D15
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P205/65R15 92H
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
P205/60R16 91V
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
P215/50R17 93V
FrontRearFrontRearFront
NGK:DENSO:NGK:DENSO:
4-cylinder models6-cylinder modelsOn some models
3 :4 :5 :
Front/Rear
SpareFront
Rear
Spare
U.S. VPU.S. LXU.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
1 :2 :3 :
4 :
3
4
3
4
3
4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 5
3, 5
1
2
3
4
1, 3, 4
2
1, 3
2, 4
05/06/03 09:59:36 31SDA630 0271
Information Provided by:
-
Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:
The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.
Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.
All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.
The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
TechnicalInform
ation
269
05/06/03 09:59:44 31SDA630 0272
Information Provided by:
- Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.
The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.
Temperature A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
270
05/06/03 09:59:48 31SDA630 0273
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.
The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.
Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).
Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).
The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN.
This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.
Manufacturer’sidentification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.
The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.
P
R
V
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
60
91Max Press
Max Load
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identif ication Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Labeling
TechnicalInform
ation
271
P205/60R16 91V
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
05/06/03 10:00:04 31SDA630 0274
Information Provided by:
*
*
The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.
Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.
Emissions Controls
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem
Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem
Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery
272
05/06/03 10:00:13 31SDA630 0275
Information Provided by:
The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.
This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System
Ignition Timing Control System
TechnicalInform
ation
273
05/06/03 10:00:22 31SDA630 0276
Information Provided by:
The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.
A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.
Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
274
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
05/06/03 10:00:29 31SDA630 0277
Information Provided by:
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).
Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.
If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.
If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.
Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.
Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.
CONTINUED
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
TechnicalInform
ation
275
05/06/03 10:00:36 31SDA630 0278
Information Provided by:
Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.
If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.
State Emissions Testing
276
05/06/03 10:00:41 31SDA630 0279
Information Provided by:
....Customer Service Information . 278....................Warranty Coverages . 279
Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 280
.....................Authorized Manuals . 281
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty
andC
ustomer
Relations
277
05/06/03 10:00:44 31SDA630 0280
Information Provided by:
Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:
When you call or write, please giveus this information:
Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you
If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.
264
Customer Service Information
278
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
(787) 250-4318
05/06/03 10:00:52 31SDA630 0281
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:
covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.
provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.
these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.
this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.
a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.
all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.
Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.
covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.
providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2006 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty
Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty
Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty
Warranty
andC
ustomer
Relations
279
05/06/03 10:01:02 31SDA630 0282
Information Provided by:
If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
280
05/07/01 10:34:04 31SDA630 0283
888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);
Information Provided by:
-
*
*
*
*2006
HON
The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized
Manuals
281
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61SDA08
61SDA09
61SDA08EL
61SDA30
31SDA630
31SDA730
31SDAM10
31SDDM10
31SDAQ30
HON-R
Price
Each
$75.00
$45.00
$50.00
$44.00
$35.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Form Description
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4
Service Manual Base Book
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6
Service Manual Supplement
2003-2006 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003-2006 Honda 2/4 door
Body Repair Manual
2006 Honda Accord
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
2006 Honda Accord 4-door Owner’s Manual
2006 Honda Accord L4 Honda Service History
2006 Honda Accord V6 Honda Service History
2006 Honda Accord 4-door Quick Start Guide
PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL
Name YearQty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
05/06/03 10:01:15 31SDA630 0284
Information Provided by:
-
-
-
SHIP
TO
PAYMENT
This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.
This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
282
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip CodeCity
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash
MasterCard
VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.
Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
( )
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
05/06/03 10:01:24 31SDA630 0285
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
BatteryCharging System
...........................Indicator . 58, 251............................Jump Starting . 245
..............................Maintenance . 234............................Specifications . 267
..............................Before Driving . 153........................................Belts, Seat . 10
Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 180
.............Break-in, New Linings . 154...........................................Fluid . 215
.........................................Parking . 99.........................System Indicator . 59
........................Wear Indicators . 179.............................Braking System . 179
........................Break-in, New Car . 154..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72
........................Brights, Headlights . 70Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 223..............................Brake Lights . 223
................Front Parking Lights . 221.................................Headlights . 218
............................Specifications . 267............Turn Signal Lights . 221, 222
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 218....................................Accessories . 162ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 76...............Accessory Power Socket . 99
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 205...................................Airbag (SRS) . 11
..........Airbag System Components . 23............................Air Conditioning . 105
.........................................Usage . 107.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 228
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 59, 180
...................................Operation . 180.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 78
........Audio System . 114, 122, 131, 135.............Automatic Speed Control . 145..............Automatic Transmission . 173
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 266.......................................Shifting . 173
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173................Shift Lever Positions . 173
....................Shift Lock Release . 176
............................Capacities Chart . 266.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
...................................CD Changer . 128.......................................CD Player . 122
..........................CD Pocket, Center . 99
........................Certification Label . 264............................................Chains . 232
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 239Changing Oil
........................................How to . 206......................................When to . 193
...Charging System Indicator . 58, 251............Checklist, Before Driving . 168
..................Childproof Door Locks . 78
Index
A B
C
IND
EX
I
05/07/01 10:34:10 31SDA630 0286
Information Provided by:
.......................................Child Seats . 34...........Lower Anchorage Points . 43..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47
..............Climate Control Sensors . 113.........................Clock, Setting the . 143
...................................Clutch Fluid . 215........................CO in the Exhaust . 274
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 169..............................Compact Spare . 238
...................Console Compartment . 99
.................Consumer Information . 278.............Controls, Instruments and . 55
Coolant........................................Adding . 209
....................................Checking . 160.........................Proper Solution . 209
...................Temperature Gauge . 65Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 274............Cruise Control Operation . 145.............Customer Service Office . 278
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 56
................Daytime Running Lights . 70............Defects, Reporting Safety . 280
................Defogger, Rear Window . 72....................................Dimensions . 266
...............Dimming the Headlights . 69Dipstick
.Automatic Transmission . 211, 212..................................Engine Oil . 159
..........................Directional Signals . 69........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 179
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 207Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 77..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269
Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 170
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 167
....................................Economy . 161..........Dual Temperature Control . 111
..............................Economy, Fuel . 161............Emergencies on the Road . 237.............Battery, Jump Starting . 245
...........Brake System Indicator . 253................Changing a Flat Tire . 239
.....Charging System Indicator . 251..................Checking the Fuses . 257
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 250...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251...Manually Closing Moonroof . 254
..................Overheated Engine . 248...........................Emergency Brake . 95
......................Emergency Flashers . 71......................Emergency Towing . 255.......................Emissions Controls . 272
Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65
Malfunction Indicator......................................Lamp . 251
.......................Oil Life Indicator . 193..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 250..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 204
...............................Overheating . 248............................Specifications . 266....................Speed Limiter . 172, 175
.......................................Starting . 169..........Engine Speed Limiter . 172, 175
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 272...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52
Index
DE
II
05/07/01 10:34:16 31SDA630 0287
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 161.........................................Gasoline . 154...........................................Gauge . 66
................Octane Requirement . 154........................Tank, Filling the . 156
................Gas Station Procedures . 156Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65...............................................Fuel . 66
...............................Speedometer . 64.................................Tachometer . 64
Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 173
..............Manual Transmission . 170......................................Glove Box . 100
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 218..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 71
........................................Headlights . 69........................................Aiming . 218
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 70............Daytime Running Lights . 71............Low Beams, Turning on . 69
.........................Reminder Chime . 69........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 218
...................................Turning on . 69..............................Head Restraints . 87
.....................Heating and Cooling . 102.................................Heated Mirror . 91
HomeLink Universal
..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 157...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 215
...................................Fan, Interior . 104.........................................Features . 101
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156Filter
...............................................Oil . 206Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 214Manual Transmission
................................Shifting the . 170.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 71
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 239Fluids
.Automatic Transmission . 211, 212..........................................Brake . 215.........................................Clutch . 215
..............Manual Transmission . 214..........................Power Steering . 216
..................Windshield Washer . 208...........................Folding Rear Seat . 88..........................Four-way Flashers . 71
.................................................Fuel . 154...............................Cap Message . 66
......................Fill Door and Cap . 156...........................................Gauge . 66
................Octane Requirement . 154........................Tank, Filling the . 156
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 257
Index
F
G
H
IND
EX
III
05/07/01 10:34:24 31SDA630 0288
Transceiver................................. 148
Information Provided by:
-
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 264Ignition
..............................................Keys . 74...........................................Switch . 76
............Timing Control System . 273........................Immobilizer System . 75
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 58
...............................Infant Restraint . 38......................................Infant Seats . 38
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 227
...................................Inside Mirror . 90.............................Inspection, Tire . 229
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47
.............................Using LATCH . 43............................Instrument Panel . 57
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 240
.......................................Jack, Tire . 239................................Jump Starting . 245
..................................................Keys . 74
.......................Label, Certification . 264.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 218.......................................Indicator . 57
.......................................Parking . 221..................................Turn Signal . 61
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 76Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 76............................Fuel Fill Door . 156
..................................Glove Box . 100....................Lockout Prevention . 78
.................................Power Door . 77...........................................Trunk . 82
........................Low Coolant Level . 160
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 170...........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 58
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 266.........................................Luggage . 164
..................................Maintenance . 191.............................Minder . 193 199
Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 198
........................................Record . 200..........................................Safety . 192
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251...................Manual Transmission . 170
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 214...............................Meters, Gauges . 64
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 90.................................Modifications . 163
.........................................Moonroof . 94......................Closing Manually . 254
.....................................Operation . 94
Index
I
J
K
L
M
IV
05/07/01 10:34:31 31SDA630 0289
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
...................Neutral Gear Position . 174..................New Vehicle Break-in . 154
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 171...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 264
..............Panel Brightness Control . 71........................Park Gear Position . 174
.................................Parking Brake . 95
.................................Parking Lights . 69..Parking Over Things that Burn . 276
..................................Parking Tips . 178.............................PGM-FI System . 273
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 34
Protecting Infants and Small.......................................Children . 38
...........Protecting Larger Children . 48.....................Using Booster Seat . 49
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 154.........................................Odometer . 64
Odometer/Outside Temperature........................................Display . 64
Oil........................Change, How to . 206......................Change, When to . 193......................Checking Engine . 159..............Pressure Indicator . 58, 250
Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 205
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 76..............................Outside Mirrors . 90
.....................Outside Temperature . 64....................Overheating, Engine . 248
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 198
...................Radiator Overheating . 248Radio/CD Sound
...............System . 118, 119, 122, 123Rear Lights, Bulb
......................Replacement . 222, 223
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 88............................Rear View Mirror . 90
.................Rear Window Defogger . 72...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 86
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 171.............................Reminder Lights . 58
.......................Remote Transmitter . 78Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 206..........................................Fuses . 257
................................Light Bulbs . 218
................................Timing Belt . 217...........................................Tires . 231
.............................Wiper Blades . 225Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 22.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 209
...............................Restraint, Child . 34..........Reverse Gear Position . 172, 174
................................Rotation, Tire . 230
Index
N
O
P
R
IND
EX
V
05/07/01 10:34:39 31SDA630 0290
Information Provided by:
-
-
......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 280
.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11
.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53
...............................Safety Messages . ii................................Satellite Radio . 135
.........................................Seat Belts . 10...............Additional Information . 20
Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20................................Maintenance . 22
Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 20, 58
...................System Components . 20...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20................Seats, Adjusting the . 85 87
............................Security System . 144.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41
...............................Serial Number . 264....................Service Minder . 193 199
.............................Service Manual . 281...........Service Station Procedure . 156
..........................Setting the Clock . 143.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173
........................Shift Lock Release . 176..............................Side Airbags . 11, 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 30How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 30...............................Signaling Turns . 69
.....................................Snow Tires . 232.......Sound System . 114, 122, 131, 135
Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 238
............................Specifications . 268....................Specifications Charts . 266
................................Speed Control . 145
........................Speed Limiter . 172, 175...................................Speedometer . 64
..........SRS, Additional Information . 23...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
.............................Airbag Service . 32
How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31
How Your SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 30
How Your Front Airbags.......................................Works . 25
How Your Side Airbags.......................................Works . 28
........................SRS Components . 23.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 59
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 76.......................Starting the Engine . 169
................With a Dead Battery . 245........Steam Coming from Engine . 248
Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 73
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 76Stereo Sound
...............System . 114, 122, 131, 135..........................................Sun Visor . 96
........................Sunglasses Holder . 100Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 11, 23
......................................Servicing . 32.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 59
...................System Components . 23
Index
S
VI
05/07/01 10:34:44 31SDA630 0291
Information Provided by:
CONTINUED
..................................Synthetic Oil . 205
.....................................Tachometer . 64.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 237
Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269.....Emissions Control Systems . 272
Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 273
.......................Temperature Gauge . 65..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 273..........................Time, Setting the . 143
....................................Timing Belt . 217
....................................Tire Chains . 232.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 239
.................................Tire Labeling . 271...............................................Tires . 227
..............................Air Pressure . 228.........................Checking Wear . 229..........................Compact Spare . 238
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269......................................Inflation . 227
..................................Inspection . 228
...................................Replacing . 231......................................Rotating . 230
...........................................Snow . 232............................Specifications . 268
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 239Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 184................Emergency Wrecker . 255
TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,
......................Automatic . 211, 212Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 214..........Fluid Selection . 211, 213, 214
..............Identification Number . 265.............Shifting the Automatic . 173
..................Shifting the Manual . 170.....................................Treadwear . 269.......................................Trip Meter . 65
................................................Trunk . 82....................Emergency Opener . 83
.................................Opening the . 82...................Open Monitor Light . 60
....................................Turn Signals . 69
Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 237
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 269........................Unleaded Gasoline . 154
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 207
..................................Vanity Mirror . 96.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 165
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 266....Vehicle Identification Number . 264
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 182
...VSA Activation Indicator . 60, 182.........................VSA Off Switch . 183
........VSA System Indicator . 60, 182.............................Vehicle Storage . 235
.................................................VIN . 264..................................Viscosity, Oil . 205
...........Voice Control System . 104, 116
Index
T
U
V
IND
EX
VII
05/07/01 10:34:51 31SDA630 0292
Information Provided by:
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53
....................Warranty Coverages . 279Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 208.....................................Operation . 68
Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 73............Alignment and Balance . 229
..........................Compact Spare . 238......................................Wrench . 239
Windows..................Operating the Power . 91
...........................Rear, Defogger . 72Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 68
.......................................Washers . 68Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 225.....................................Operation . 68
....................................Worn Tires . 229.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 255
Index
W
VIII
05/07/01 10:34:55 31SDA630 0293
Information Provided by:
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Spare Tire Pressure:
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (includingfilter):
Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).
Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page
).
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).
Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
2.3 US qt (2.2 )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
U.S. VP, SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
U.S. LX
Front:
Rear:
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
204
211 212
214
216
215
5-speed manual transmission:
6-speed manual transmission:
05/07/01 10:35:13 31SDA630 0297
Information Provided by: